blob: f86e97b6cc72fdc10809d19bb195603988a0c5cb [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000021#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
23#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000024#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000030#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000031#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000033#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000034#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000035#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000036#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +000038#include "llvm/IR/DebugInfo.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
42#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
44#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000045#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
46#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000048#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
49#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
50#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
51#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000052#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000053#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000054#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000056#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
57#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
Robert Loughercf176742016-12-15 16:17:53 +000058#include "llvm/IR/DebugInfo.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000059#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000060#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000061#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000062#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +000063#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000064#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000065#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000066#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000067#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000068#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000069#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000070#include <cassert>
71#include <climits>
72#include <cstddef>
73#include <cstdint>
74#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000075#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000076#include <set>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000077#include <utility>
78#include <vector>
79
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000080using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000081using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000082
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000083#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
84
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000085// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
86// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
87// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
88// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000089static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
90 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
91 cl::desc(
92 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
93
94static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
95 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
96 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000097
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000098static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000099 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
100 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000101
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000102static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
103 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
104 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000105
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000106static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
107 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
108 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
109 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
110 "predicated store"));
111
112static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
113 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
114 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
115 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
116
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000117static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
118 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
119 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
120 "executed"));
121
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000122static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
123 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
124 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
125 "speculatively executed instructions"));
126
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000127STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000128STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
129 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
130STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
131 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
132STATISTIC(
133 NumLookupTablesHoles,
134 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000135STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000136STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
137 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000138STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000139
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000140namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000141
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000142// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
143// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
144// cases composing the case group.
145typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000146 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000147// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
148// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
149// switch for that PHI.
150typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000151
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000152/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
153struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
154 ConstantInt *Value;
155 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000156
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000157 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000158 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
159
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000160 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
161 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
162 return Value < RHS.Value;
163 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000164
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000165 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
166};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000167
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000168class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000169 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000170 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000171 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000172 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000173 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000174 // See comments in SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch.
175 bool LateSimplifyCFG;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000176 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000177 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
178 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000179 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000180 BasicBlock *Pred,
181 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000182 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
183 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000184
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000185 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000186 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000187 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
188 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000189 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000190 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000191 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000192 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000193 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
194 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000195
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000196public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000197 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000198 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000199 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
200 bool LateSimplifyCFG)
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +0000201 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000202 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), LateSimplifyCFG(LateSimplifyCFG) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000203
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000204 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
205};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000206
207} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000208
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000209/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000210/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000211static bool
212SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000213 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000214 if (SI1 == SI2)
215 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000216
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000217 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
218 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
219 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
220 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
221 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000222
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000223 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
224 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000225 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
226 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
227 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000228 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
229 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000230 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
231 if (FailBlocks)
232 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
233 Fail = true;
234 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000235 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000236
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000237 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000238}
239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000240/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
241/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
242/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000243static bool
244isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
245 Instruction *Cond,
246 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
247 if (SI1 == SI2)
248 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000249 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
250
251 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000252 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000253 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
254 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
255 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
256 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000257 if (!Ci2)
258 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000259 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
260 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
261 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
262 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
263 return false;
264
265 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
266 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000267 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000268 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
269 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
270 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000271 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
272 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000273 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000274 return false;
275 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
276 }
277 return true;
278}
279
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000280/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
281/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
282/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
283/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000284static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
285 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000286 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
287 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000288
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000289 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000290 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000291 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000292}
293
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000294/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
295/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
296/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000297/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000298static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000299 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000300 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000301 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000302 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000303}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000304
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000305/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
306/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000307/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
308/// which works well enough for us.
309///
310/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000311/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
312/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
313/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
314/// set and true is returned.
315///
316/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
317/// Select whose cost is 2.
318///
319/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
320/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
321/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000322static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000323 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000324 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000325 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
326 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000327 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
328 // so limit the recursion depth.
329 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
330 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
331 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
332 return false;
333
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000334 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000335 if (!I) {
336 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
337 // can be executed unconditionally.
338 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
339 if (C->canTrap())
340 return false;
341 return true;
342 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000343 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000344
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000345 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000346 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000347 if (PBB == BB)
348 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000349
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000350 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
351 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
353 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000354 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000355 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000356
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000357 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
358 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000359 if (!AggressiveInsts)
360 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000361
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000362 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000363 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
364 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000365
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000366 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
367 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
368 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000369 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000370 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000371
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000372 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000373
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000374 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
375 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
376 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
377 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
378 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
379 // enabled further IR optimizations.
380 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
381 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000382 return false;
383
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000384 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
385 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000386
387 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
388 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000389 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000390 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
391 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000392 return false;
393 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
394 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000395 return true;
396}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000397
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000398/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000399/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000400static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000401 // Normal constant int.
402 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000403 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000404 return CI;
405
406 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
407 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000408 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000409
410 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
411 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
412 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
413
414 // IntToPtr const int.
415 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
416 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
417 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
418 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
419 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
420 return CI;
421 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000422 return cast<ConstantInt>(
423 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000424 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000425 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000426}
427
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000428namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000429
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000430/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
431/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
432/// structure.
433/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
434/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
435/// representing the different cases for the switch.
436/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
437/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
438/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
439/// fail.
440struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000441 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000442 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
443 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
444 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
445 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000446
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000447 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000448 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
449 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
450 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000451 }
452
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000453 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000454 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000455 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000456 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000457
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000458private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000459 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
460 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
461 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000462 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
463 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000464 CompValue = NewVal;
465 return (CompValue != nullptr);
466 }
467
468 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
469 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
470 /// match depending on isEQ).
471 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
472 /// against is placed in CompValue.
473 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
474 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000475 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000476 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
477 ICmpInst *ICI;
478 ConstantInt *C;
479 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000480 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000481 return false;
482 }
483
484 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000485 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000486
487 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000488 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000489 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000490 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000491
492 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
493 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
494
495 /*
496 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
497 x : BITVECTOR(64);
498 y : BITVECTOR(64);
499 z : BITVECTOR(64);
500 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
501 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
502 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
503 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000504 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
505 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
506 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000507 */
508
509 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
510 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
511 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
512 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
513 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
514 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
515 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
516
517 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
518 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
519 //
520 // mask = (1 << z)
521 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
522 //
523 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
524 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
525
526 // Pattern match a special case:
527 /*
528 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
529 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
530 );
531 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000532 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000533 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
534 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000535 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000536 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000537 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000538 return false;
539
540 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000541 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000542 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
543 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000544 UsedICmps++;
545 return true;
546 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000547 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000548
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000549 // Pattern match a special case:
550 /*
551 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
552 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
553 );
554 */
555 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
556 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
557 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
558 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
559 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
560 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
561 return false;
562
563 Vals.push_back(C);
564 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
565 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
566 UsedICmps++;
567 return true;
568 }
569 }
570
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000571 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000572 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000573 return false;
574
575 UsedICmps++;
576 Vals.push_back(C);
577 return ICI->getOperand(0);
578 }
579
580 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000581 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
582 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000583
584 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
585 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
586 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000587 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
588 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000589 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
590 }
591
592 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
593 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
594 // x != 0 && x != 1.
595 if (!isEQ)
596 Span = Span.inverse();
597
598 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
599 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
600 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000601 }
602
603 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000604 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 return false;
606
607 // Add all values from the range to the set
608 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
609 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000610
611 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000612 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000613 }
614
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000615 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000616 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
617 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
618 /// vector.
619 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000620 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000621 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
622 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000623
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000624 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
625 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000626 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000627
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000628 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000629 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000630 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000631
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000632 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000633 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000634
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000635 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
636 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
637 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000638 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
639 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
640 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
641 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000642 continue;
643 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000644
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000645 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000646 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000647 // Match succeed, continue the loop
648 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000649 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000650
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000651 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
652 // comparison against the same value as the others.
653 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
654 if (!Extra) {
655 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000656 continue;
657 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000658 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
659 CompValue = nullptr;
660 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000661 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000662 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000663};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000664
665} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000666
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000667static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000668 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000669 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
670 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
671 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
672 if (BI->isConditional())
673 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000674 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
675 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000676 }
677
678 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000679 if (Cond)
680 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000681}
682
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000683/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000684/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000685Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000686 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000687 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
688 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
689 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000690 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
691 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
692 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000693 CV = SI->getCondition();
694 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000695 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000696 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000697 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000698 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000699 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000700
701 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000702 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000703 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
704 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000705 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000706 CV = Ptr;
707 }
708 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000709 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000710}
711
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000712/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000713/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000714BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
715 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000716 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000717 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000718 for (auto Case : SI->cases())
719 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
720 Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000721 return SI->getDefaultDest();
722 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000723
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000724 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000725 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000726 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000727 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
728 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000729 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000730}
731
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000732/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000733/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000734static void
735EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
736 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000737 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000738}
739
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000740/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000741static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
742 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000743 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
744
745 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
746 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
747 std::swap(V1, V2);
748
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000749 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000750 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000751 if (V1->size() == 1) {
752 // Just scan V2.
753 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
754 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
755 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
756 return true;
757 }
758
759 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
760 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
761 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
762 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
763 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
764 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
765 return true;
766 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
767 ++i1;
768 else
769 ++i2;
770 }
771 return false;
772}
773
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000774/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
775/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
776/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
777/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
778/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000779bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
780 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000781 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000782 if (!PredVal)
783 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000784
785 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
786 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000787 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
788 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000789
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000790 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
791 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
792
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000793 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000794 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000795 BasicBlock *PredDef =
796 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
797 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000798
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000799 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000800 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000801 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000802 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000803
804 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
805 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
806 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
807 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
808 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
809 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000810 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000811 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000812
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000813 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
814 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
815 // uncond br.
816 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
817 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000818 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000819 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000820
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000821 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000822 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000823
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000824 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000825 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
826 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000827
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000828 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
829 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000830 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000831
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000832 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
833 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000834 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000835 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
836 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000837
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000838 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000839 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000840
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000841 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
842 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000843 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000844 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
845 if (HasWeight)
846 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
847 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000848 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000849 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
850 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000851 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
852 --i;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000853 if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000854 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000855 std::swap(Weights[i->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000856 Weights.pop_back();
857 }
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000858 i->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000859 SI->removeCase(i);
860 }
861 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000862 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000863 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000864 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
865 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000866
867 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000868 return true;
869 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000870
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000871 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
872 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000873 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000874 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000875 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
876 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000877 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000878 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000879 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
880 }
881 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000882
883 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
884 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000885 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000886 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
887 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
888 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
889 break;
890 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000891
892 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000893 if (!TheRealDest)
894 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000895
896 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
897 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000898 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
899 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
900 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000901 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000902 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000903
904 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000905 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000906 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000907
908 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000909 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
910 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000911
912 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
913 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000914}
915
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000916namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000917
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000918/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
919/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
920/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
921struct ConstantIntOrdering {
922 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
923 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
924 }
925};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000926
927} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000928
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000929static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
930 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
931 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
932 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000933 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000934 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000935 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000936}
937
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000938static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000939 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000940 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000941 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000942 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
943
944 return false;
945}
946
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000947/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
948/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
949/// metadata.
950static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
951 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000952 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000953 assert(MD);
954 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000955 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000956 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000957 }
958
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000959 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
960 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
961 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000962 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000963 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
964 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
965 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
966 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000967 }
968}
969
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000970/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000971static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000972 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
973 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
974 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
975 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
976 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000977 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000978}
979
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000980/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
981/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000982/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
983/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000984bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
985 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000986 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000987 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000988 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
989 bool Changed = false;
990
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000991 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000992 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000993 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000994
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000995 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
996 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000997 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000998
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000999 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +00001000 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001001 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1002 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
Benjamin Kramer46f5e2c2017-03-24 14:15:35 +00001003 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split"))
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001004 return false;
1005 }
1006 }
1007
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001008 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001009 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001010 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1011
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001012 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001013 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1014
1015 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1016 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1017 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001018 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001019
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001020 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1021 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001022 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1023 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1024
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001025 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001026 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001027 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001028 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1029 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1030 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001031 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1032 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1033 // successor's weights
1034 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001035
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001036 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001037 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001038 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001039 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001040 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1041 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1042 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001043 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001044
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001045 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1046 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1047 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001048 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001049 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1050 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1051 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1052 else {
1053 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1054 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001055
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001056 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1057 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001058 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1059 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001060 Weights.pop_back();
1061 }
1062
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001063 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001064 --i;
1065 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001066 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001067
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001068 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001069 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1070 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1071 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1072 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1073 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001074
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001075 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1076 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001077 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1078 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1079 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1080 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1081 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001082 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1083 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1084 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1085 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001086 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1087 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001088 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001089 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001090
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001091 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1092 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1093 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1094 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1095 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1096 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1097 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1098 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001099 } else {
1100 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1101 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1102 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001103 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1104 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001105 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1106 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1107 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001108
1109 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001110 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1111 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001112 Weights.pop_back();
1113 }
1114
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001115 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1116 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001117 --i;
1118 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001119 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001120
1121 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1122 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001123 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1124 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1125 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001126 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1127 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001128 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1129 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001130 PTIHandled.erase(
1131 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001132 }
1133
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001134 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1135 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001136 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001137 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001138 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1139 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001140 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001141 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001142 }
1143
1144 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1145 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1146 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001147 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1148 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001149
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001150 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001151 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001152 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001153 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001154 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001155 }
1156
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001157 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001158 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1159 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001160 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001161 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1162 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001163
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001164 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1165 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1166 FitWeights(Weights);
1167
1168 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1169
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001170 NewSI->setMetadata(
1171 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1172 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001173 }
1174
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001175 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001176
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001177 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1178 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1179 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001180 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001181 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1182 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001183 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001184 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001185 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001186 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1187 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001188 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001189 }
1190 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1191 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001192
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001193 Changed = true;
1194 }
1195 }
1196 return Changed;
1197}
1198
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001199// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1200// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1201// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001202static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1203 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001204 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001205 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001206 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001207 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1208 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1209 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001210 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001211 return false;
1212 }
1213 }
1214 }
1215 return true;
1216}
1217
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001218static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1219
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001220/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1221/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1222/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001223static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001224 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001225 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1226 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1227 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1228 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1229 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001230 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1231 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001232
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001233 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1234 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1235
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001236 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001237 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1238 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1239 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1240 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1241 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001242 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001243 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001244 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001245 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001246 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001247 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001248 return false;
1249
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001250 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001251
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001252 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001253 do {
1254 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1255 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1256 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1257 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001258
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001259 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1260 return Changed;
1261
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001262 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1263 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1264 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001265 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001266 if (!I2->use_empty())
1267 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Peter Collingbourne8f1dd5c2016-09-07 23:39:04 +00001268 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001269 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1270 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1271 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1272 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1273 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1274 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1275 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1276 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1277 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1278 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001279 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001280
Robert Lougherb0124c12017-01-12 21:11:09 +00001281 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1282 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1283 if (!isa<CallInst>(I1))
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +00001284 I1->setDebugLoc(
1285 DILocation::getMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc()));
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001286
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001287 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001288 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001289
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001290 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1291 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001292 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1293 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1294 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1295 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1296 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001297 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001298 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001299 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001300 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001301 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001302
1303 return true;
1304
1305HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001306 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1307 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001308 return Changed;
1309
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001310 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001311 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001312 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001313 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1314 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1315 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1316 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1317 continue;
1318
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001319 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1320 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1321 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1322 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001323 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001324
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001325 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001326 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001327 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001328 return Changed;
1329 }
1330 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001331
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001332 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001333 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001334 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001335 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001336 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1337 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001338 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001339 }
1340
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001341 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001342 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1343 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1344 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1345 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001346 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001347 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001348 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001349 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001350 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001351 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1352 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001353 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1354 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001355
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001356 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1357 // that determines the right value.
1358 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001359 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001360 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1361 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1362 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001363
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001364 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1365 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1366 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1367 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001368 }
1369 }
1370
1371 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001372 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1373 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001374
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001375 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001376 return true;
1377}
1378
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001379// Is it legal to place a variable in operand \c OpIdx of \c I?
1380// FIXME: This should be promoted to Instruction.
1381static bool canReplaceOperandWithVariable(const Instruction *I,
1382 unsigned OpIdx) {
Hal Finkelac5803b2016-09-07 21:38:22 +00001383 // We can't have a PHI with a metadata type.
1384 if (I->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType()->isMetadataTy())
1385 return false;
1386
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001387 // Early exit.
1388 if (!isa<Constant>(I->getOperand(OpIdx)))
1389 return true;
1390
1391 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
1392 default:
1393 return true;
1394 case Instruction::Call:
1395 case Instruction::Invoke:
1396 // FIXME: many arithmetic intrinsics have no issue taking a
1397 // variable, however it's hard to distingish these from
1398 // specials such as @llvm.frameaddress that require a constant.
Sanjoy Dasbc357e82016-10-12 18:15:33 +00001399 if (isa<IntrinsicInst>(I))
1400 return false;
1401
1402 // Constant bundle operands may need to retain their constant-ness for
1403 // correctness.
1404 if (ImmutableCallSite(I).isBundleOperand(OpIdx))
1405 return false;
1406
1407 return true;
1408
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001409 case Instruction::ShuffleVector:
1410 // Shufflevector masks are constant.
1411 return OpIdx != 2;
1412 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
1413 case Instruction::InsertValue:
1414 // All operands apart from the first are constant.
1415 return OpIdx == 0;
1416 case Instruction::Alloca:
1417 return false;
1418 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
1419 if (OpIdx == 0)
1420 return true;
1421 gep_type_iterator It = std::next(gep_type_begin(I), OpIdx - 1);
Peter Collingbourneab85225b2016-12-02 02:24:42 +00001422 return It.isSequential();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001423 }
1424}
1425
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001426// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1427// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1428// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1429// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1430// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1431static bool canSinkInstructions(
1432 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1433 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001434 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1435 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1436 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1437 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1438 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1439 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1440 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1441 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001442
1443 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1444 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1445 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1446 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1447 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1448 return false;
1449
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001450 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1451 // have no uses.
1452 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1453 return false;
1454 }
1455
1456 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1457 for (auto *I : Insts)
1458 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1459 return false;
1460
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001461 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1462 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1463 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1464 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001465 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1466 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001467 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001468 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001469 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001470 return (PNUse &&
1471 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1472 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1473 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001474 }))
1475 return false;
1476 }
1477
Aditya Kumar24f6ad512017-03-16 14:09:18 +00001478 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1479 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1480 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1481 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1482 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1483 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1484 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1485 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1486 if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1487 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1488 }))
1489 return false;
1490 if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1491 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1492 }))
1493 return false;
1494
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001495 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1496 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1497 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1498 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001499
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001500 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001501 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1502 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001503 };
1504 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1505 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1506 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1507 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001508 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1509 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001510 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1511 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001512 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001513 for (auto *I : Insts)
1514 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001515 }
1516 }
1517 return true;
1518}
1519
1520// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1521// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1522// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001523static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001524 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1525
1526 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1527 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1528 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001529 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1530 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1531 do {
1532 I = I->getPrevNode();
1533 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1534 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1535 Insts.push_back(I);
1536 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001537
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001538 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1539 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1540 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1541 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001542 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001543 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1544 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1545 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1546 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1547 return U == PNUse;
1548 }))
1549 return false;
1550 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001551
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001552 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1553 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001554 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1555 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1556 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1557 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1558 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1559 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1560 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1561 // small mess we may make.
1562 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1563 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1564 });
1565 if (!NeedPHI) {
1566 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1567 continue;
1568 }
1569
1570 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1571 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1572 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1573 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1574 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1575 for (auto *I : Insts)
1576 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1577 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1578 }
1579
1580 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1581 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1582 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1583 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1584 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1585
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001586 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations of
1587 // all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location of the
1588 // "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the loop below.
Robert Lougher6717a6f2017-01-12 18:33:49 +00001589 const DILocation *Loc = I0->getDebugLoc();
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001590
1591 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001592 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001593 if (I != I0) {
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001594 Loc = DILocation::getMergedLocation(Loc, I->getDebugLoc());
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001595 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001596 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1597 }
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001598 if (!isa<CallInst>(I0))
1599 I0->setDebugLoc(Loc);
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001600
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001601 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1602 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1603 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1604 // instruction and nuke it.
1605 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1606 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1607 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1608 PN->eraseFromParent();
1609 }
1610
1611 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1612 for (auto *I : Insts)
1613 if (I != I0)
1614 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001615
1616 return true;
1617}
1618
1619namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001620
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001621 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1622 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1623 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1624 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1625 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1626 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1627 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1628 // ...
1629 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1630 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1631 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1632 bool Fail;
1633 public:
1634 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) :
1635 Blocks(Blocks) {
1636 reset();
1637 }
1638
1639 void reset() {
1640 Fail = false;
1641 Insts.clear();
1642 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001643 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1644 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1645 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1646 if (!Inst) {
1647 // Block wasn't big enough.
1648 Fail = true;
1649 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001650 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001651 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001652 }
1653 }
1654
1655 bool isValid() const {
1656 return !Fail;
1657 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001658
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001659 void operator -- () {
1660 if (Fail)
1661 return;
1662 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001663 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1664 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001665 // Already at beginning of block.
1666 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001667 Fail = true;
1668 return;
1669 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001670 }
1671 }
1672
1673 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1674 return Insts;
1675 }
1676 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001677
1678} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001679
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001680/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001681/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1682/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1683/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1684static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1685 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001686 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1687
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001688 // We support two situations:
1689 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1690 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1691 //
1692 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1693 // else-if patterns;
1694 //
1695 // if (a) f(1);
1696 // else if (b) f(2);
1697 //
1698 // produces:
1699 //
1700 // [if]
1701 // / \
1702 // [f(1)] [if]
1703 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001704 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001705 // | [f(2)]|
1706 // \ | /
1707 // [ end ]
1708 //
1709 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1710 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1711 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1712 //
1713 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1714 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1715 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1716 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1717 //
1718 // [if]
1719 // / \
1720 // [x(1)] [if]
1721 // | | \
1722 // | | \
1723 // | [x(2)] |
1724 // \ / |
1725 // [sink.split] |
1726 // \ /
1727 // [ end ]
1728 //
1729 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1730 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
1731 for (auto *B : predecessors(BBEnd)) {
1732 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1733 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1734 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1735 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1736 Cond = T;
1737 else
1738 return false;
1739 }
1740 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001741 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001742
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001743 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001744 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1745 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1746 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1747 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1748 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1749 // PHIOperands.
1750 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1751 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1752 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001753 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001754 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1755 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1756 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1757 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1758 ++ScanIdx;
1759 --LRI;
1760 }
1761
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001762 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001763 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1764 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1765 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1766 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1767 ++NumPHIdValues;
1768 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1769 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1770 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1771 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001772
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001773 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1774 };
1775
1776 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001777 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1778 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1779 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1780 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1781 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1782 LRI.reset();
1783 unsigned Idx = 0;
1784 bool Profitable = false;
1785 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1786 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1787 Profitable = true;
1788 break;
1789 }
1790 --LRI;
1791 ++Idx;
1792 }
1793 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001794 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001795
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001796 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
1797 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1798 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
1799 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BI1->getSuccessor(0), UnconditionalPreds,
1800 ".sink.split"))
1801 // Edges couldn't be split.
1802 return false;
1803 Changed = true;
1804 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001805
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001806 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1807 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1808 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1809 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1810 // per sunk instruction).
1811 //
1812 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1813 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1814 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1815 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1816 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1817 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1818 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1819 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001820 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001821 << "\n");
1822
1823 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1824 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001825 LRI.reset();
1826 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001827 // Too many PHIs would be created.
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001828 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001829 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001830 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001831
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001832 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001833 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001834 NumSinkCommons++;
1835 Changed = true;
1836 }
1837 return Changed;
1838}
1839
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001840/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1841/// conditional block.
1842///
1843/// We are looking for code like the following:
1844/// BrBB:
1845/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1846/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1847/// ... // function).
1848/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1849/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1850/// ThenBB:
1851/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1852/// br label EndBB
1853/// EndBB:
1854/// ...
1855/// We are going to transform this into:
1856/// BrBB:
1857/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1858/// ... //
1859/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1860/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1861/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1862/// ...
1863///
1864/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1865/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001866static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1867 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001868 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1869 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001870 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001871
1872 // Volatile or atomic.
1873 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001874 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001875
1876 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1877
1878 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001879 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001880 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1881 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1882 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001883 // Skip debug info.
1884 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1885 continue;
1886 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001887
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001888 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001889 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001890 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001891
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001892 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1893 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1894 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1895 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1896 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001897 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001898 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001899 }
1900
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001901 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001902}
1903
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001904/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001905///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001906/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1907/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1908/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1909/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1910/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1911///
1912/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1913/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1914/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1915/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1916///
1917///
1918/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1919/// \code
1920/// BB:
1921/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1922/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1923/// ThenBB:
1924/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001925/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001926/// EndBB:
1927/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1928/// ...
1929/// \endcode
1930///
1931/// Into this IR:
1932/// \code
1933/// BB:
1934/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1935/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1936/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1937/// ...
1938/// \endcode
1939///
1940/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001941static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001942 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001943 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1944 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1945 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1946 return false;
1947
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001948 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1949 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1950
1951 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1952 // to swap the select operands later.
1953 bool Invert = false;
1954 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1955 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1956 Invert = true;
1957 }
1958 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1959
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001960 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1961 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1962 // - They are defined in BB, and
1963 // - They have no side effects, and
1964 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1965 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1966
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001967 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001968 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1969 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001970 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001971 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001972 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001973 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001974 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001975 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1976 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001977
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001978 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001979 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001980 ++SpeculationCost;
1981 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001982 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001983
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001984 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001985 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1986 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1987 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001988 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001989 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001990 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1991 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001992 return false;
1993
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001994 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1995 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1996 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1997
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001998 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001999 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002000 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002001 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002002 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002003 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002004 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
2005
2006 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002007 }
2008 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002009
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002010 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
2011 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
2012 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002013 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2014 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2015 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002016 I != E; ++I)
2017 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002018 ++SpeculationCost;
2019 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002020 return false;
2021 }
2022
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002023 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2024 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002025 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002026 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002027 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2028 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002029
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002030 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002031 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002032 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002033 continue;
2034
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002035 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
2036 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
2037 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
2038 return false;
2039
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002040 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002041 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2042 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2043 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002044 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2045
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002046 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2047 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002048 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002049 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2050 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002051 unsigned MaxCost =
2052 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002053 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002054 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002055
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002056 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2057 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2058 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002059 // constant expression.
2060 ++SpeculationCost;
2061 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002062 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002063 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002064
2065 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2066 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002067 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002068 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002069
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002070 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002071 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002072
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002073 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2074 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002075 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002076 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2077 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2078 if (Invert)
2079 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002080 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
2081 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002082 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00002083 SpeculatedStore->setDebugLoc(
2084 DILocation::getMergedLocation(
2085 BI->getDebugLoc(), SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc()));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002086 }
2087
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002088 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2089 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002090 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002091 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2092
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002093 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002094 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2095 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002096
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002097 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002098 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002099 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
2100 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
2101 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2102 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2103 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2104 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
2105
2106 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2107 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2108 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002109
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002110 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002111 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2112 // destinations were inverted.
2113 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002114 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002115 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002116 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
2117 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002118 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2119 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002120 }
2121
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002122 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002123 return true;
2124}
2125
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002126/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002127static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2128 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002129 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002130
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00002131 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002132 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2133 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002134 if (Size > 10)
2135 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002136 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002137
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002138 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002139 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002140 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
2141 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002142 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2143 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002144 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002145
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002146 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2147 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002148
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002149 return true;
2150}
2151
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002152/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2153/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2154/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002155static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2156 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002157 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2158 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002159 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2160 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002161 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2162 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002163
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002164 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2165 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002166 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002167 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002168 }
2169
2170 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002171 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2172 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002173
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002174 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002175 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002176 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2177 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2178 }))
2179 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002180
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002181 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2182 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002183 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002184 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002185 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2186 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002187
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002188 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2189 // branch to RealDest.
2190 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2191 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002192
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002193 if (RealDest == BB)
2194 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002195 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002196 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2197 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002198
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002199 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2200 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2201 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2202 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002203 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2204 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2205 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002206 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002207
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002208 // Update PHI nodes.
2209 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002210
2211 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2212 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2213 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2214 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002215 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002216 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2217 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2218 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2219 continue;
2220 }
2221 // Clone the instruction.
2222 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002223 if (BBI->hasName())
2224 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002225
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002226 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002227 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2228 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002229 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2230 *i = PI->second;
2231 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002232
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002233 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002234 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002235 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2236 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2237 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2238 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
2239 N = nullptr;
2240 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002241 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002242 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002243 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002244 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002245 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2246 if (N)
2247 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002248
2249 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2250 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2251 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2252 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002253 }
2254
2255 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2256 // to EdgeBB instead.
2257 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2258 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2259 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2260 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2261 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2262 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002263
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002264 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002265 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002266 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002267
2268 return false;
2269}
2270
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002271/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2272/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002273static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2274 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002275 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2276 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2277 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2278 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2279 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2280 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002281 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2282 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2283 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002284 if (!IfCond ||
2285 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2286 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2287 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002288
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002289 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2290 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2291 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2292 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2293 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2294 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2295 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2296 if (NumPhis > 2)
2297 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002298
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002299 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2300 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2301 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002302 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002303 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2304 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002305 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2306 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002307
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002308 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2309 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002310 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002311 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002312 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002313 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002314 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002315
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002316 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002317 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002318 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002319 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002320 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002321 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002322
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002323 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002324 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2325 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002326 if (!PN)
2327 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002328
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002329 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2330 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2331 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2332 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2333 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2334 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2335 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002336
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002337 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2338 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2339 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2340 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002341 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002342 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2343 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2344 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002345 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002346 } else {
2347 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002348 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2349 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002350 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002351 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002352 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2353 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002354 return false;
2355 }
2356 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002357
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002358 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002359 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002360 } else {
2361 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002362 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2363 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002364 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002365 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002366 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2367 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002368 return false;
2369 }
2370 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002371
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002372 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002373 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002374
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002375 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2376 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002377 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002378 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002379
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002380 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2381 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002382 if (IfBlock1) {
2383 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2384 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002385 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002386 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002387 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002388 }
2389 if (IfBlock2) {
2390 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2391 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002392 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002393 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002394 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002395 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002396
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002397 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2398 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002399 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002400 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002401
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002402 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2403 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2404 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002405 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002406 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002407
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002408 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2409 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2410 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2411 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002412 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2413 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002414 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002415 return true;
2416}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002417
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002418/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2419/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002420/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002421static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002422 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002423 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2424 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2425 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2426 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2427 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002428
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002429 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2430 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2431 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002432 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002433 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002434 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002435 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002436
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002437 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002438 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2439 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2440 // branch into a return.
2441 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2442 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2443 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002444 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002445 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002446 return true;
2447 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002448
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002449 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2450 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2451 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2452 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002453
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002454 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2455 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2456 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2457 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2458 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2459 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2460 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002461
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002462 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2463 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2464 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2465 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2466 // safe.
2467 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2468 if (TCV->canTrap())
2469 return false;
2470 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2471 if (FCV->canTrap())
2472 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002473
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002474 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2475 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2476 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2477 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002478
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002479 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2480 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002481 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002482 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002483 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2484 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2485 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2486 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002487 TrueValue =
2488 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002489 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002490 }
2491
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002492 Value *RI =
2493 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002494
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002495 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002496
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002497 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002498 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002499 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002500
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002501 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2502
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002503 return true;
2504}
2505
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002506/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002507/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002508static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002509 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2510 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002511 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2512 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002513 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2514 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2515 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2516 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2517 return true;
2518 }
2519 }
2520 return false;
2521}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002522
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002523/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2524/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2525/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2526static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2527 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2528 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2529 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2530 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2531 bool PredHasWeights =
2532 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2533 bool SuccHasWeights =
2534 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2535 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2536 if (!PredHasWeights)
2537 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2538 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2539 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2540 return true;
2541 } else {
2542 return false;
2543 }
2544}
2545
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002546/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2547/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2548/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002549bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002550 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002551
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002552 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002553 if (BI->isConditional())
2554 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2555 else {
2556 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2557 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2558 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2559 // predecessor.
2560 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2561 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2562 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2563 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2564 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002565 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002566 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002567 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2568 Cond = Curr;
2569 break;
2570 }
2571 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2572 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2573 return false;
2574 }
2575 }
2576
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002577 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002578 return false;
2579 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002580
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002581 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2582 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002583 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002584
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002585 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002586 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002587
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002588 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002589 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2590 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002591
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002592 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002593 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002594
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002595 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2596 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2597 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2598 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2599 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2600 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002601 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002602 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2603 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2604 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002605 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002606 return false;
2607 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2608 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2609 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2610 return false;
2611 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2612 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2613 // and Cond.
2614 ++NumBonusInsts;
2615 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2616 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2617 return false;
2618 }
2619
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002620 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2621 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2622 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2623 if (CE->canTrap())
2624 return false;
2625 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2626 if (CE->canTrap())
2627 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002628
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002629 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002630 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002631 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002632 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2633 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002634
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002635 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2636 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002637 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002638
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002639 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2640 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2641 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002642 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002643 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002644 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002645 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2646 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002647 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002648
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002649 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002650 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002651 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002652
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002653 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002654 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002655 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002656 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002657 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002658 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2659 Opc = Instruction::And;
2660 InvertPredCond = true;
2661 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2662 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2663 InvertPredCond = true;
2664 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002665 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002666 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002667 } else {
2668 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2669 continue;
2670 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002671
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002672 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002673 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002674
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002675 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2676 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002677 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002678
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002679 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2680 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2681 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2682 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002683 NewCond =
2684 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002685 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002686
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002687 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002688 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002689 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002690
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002691 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002692 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002693 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2694 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2695 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002696 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002697 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002698 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002699 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2700 continue;
2701 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2702 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002703 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002704 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002705
2706 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2707 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2708 // only given the branch precondition.
2709 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2710 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002711 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002712
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002713 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2714 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002715 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002716 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002717
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002718 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2719 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002720 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002721 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002722 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002723 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002724 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002725 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002726
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002727 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002728 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2729 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002730 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2731
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002732 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002733 bool HasWeights =
2734 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2735 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002736 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2737
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002738 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002739 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002740 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2741 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002742 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002743 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002744 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002745 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2746 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2747 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002748 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2749 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2750 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002751 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002752 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2753 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2754 }
2755 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002756 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002757 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2758 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002759 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002760 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002761 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2762 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2763 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2764 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002765 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2766 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002767 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2768 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2769 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002770 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2771 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2772 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2773
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002774 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2775 NewWeights.end());
2776 PBI->setMetadata(
2777 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2778 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002779 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002780 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002781 } else {
2782 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2783 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002784 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002785 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002786 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002787 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002788 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2789 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2790 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2791 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002792 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2793 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2794 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2795 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002796 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002797 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2798 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002799 } else {
2800 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2801 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2802 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002803 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2804 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002805 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002806 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2807 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2808 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2809 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002810 }
2811 }
2812 // Update PHI Node.
2813 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2814 MergedCond);
2815 }
2816 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2817 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2818 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2819 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002820 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002821
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002822 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2823 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2824 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2825 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2826
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002827 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2828 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2829
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002830 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002831 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2832 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2833 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002834
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002835 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002836 }
2837 return false;
2838}
2839
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002840// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2841// nullptr.
2842static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2843 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2844 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2845 if (!BB)
2846 continue;
2847 for (auto &I : *BB)
2848 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2849 if (S)
2850 // Multiple stores seen.
2851 return nullptr;
2852 else
2853 S = SI;
2854 }
2855 }
2856 return S;
2857}
2858
2859static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2860 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2861 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2862 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2863 //
2864 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2865 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2866 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2867 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2868 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2869 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2870 // one.
2871 //
2872 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2873 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2874 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2875 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2876 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002877
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002878 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2879 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2880 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2881 if (!AlternativeV)
2882 break;
2883
2884 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2885 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2886 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2887 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2888 break;
2889 PHI = nullptr;
2890 }
2891 if (PHI)
2892 return PHI;
2893
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002894 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2895 if (!AlternativeV &&
2896 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2897 return V;
2898
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002899 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002900 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2901 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2902 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002903 PHI->addIncoming(
2904 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002905 return PHI;
2906}
2907
2908static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2909 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2910 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2911 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2912 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2913 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2914 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2915 };
2916
2917 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2918 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2919 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2920 if (!BB)
2921 return true;
2922 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2923 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2924 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002925 unsigned N = 0;
2926 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2927 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2928 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2929 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2930 ++N;
2931 // Free instructions.
2932 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2933 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2934 continue;
2935 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002936 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002937 }
2938 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002939 };
2940
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002941 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2942 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2943 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002944 return false;
2945
2946 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2947 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2948 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2949 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2950 // testing.
2951 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2952 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2953 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2954 return false;
2955
2956 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2957 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2958 return false;
2959
2960 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2961 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2962 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2963 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2964 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2965 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2966 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2967 //
2968 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2969 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2970 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2971 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2972 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2973 return false;
2974 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2975 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2976 return false;
2977 if (QTB)
2978 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2979 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2980 return false;
2981 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2982 I != E; ++I)
2983 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2984 return false;
2985
2986 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2987 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2988 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2989 ->getCondition();
2990 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2991 ->getCondition();
2992
2993 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2994 PStore->getParent());
2995 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2996 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2997
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002998 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2999
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003000 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
3001 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
3002
3003 if (InvertPCond)
3004 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
3005 if (InvertQCond)
3006 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
3007 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3008
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003009 auto *T =
3010 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003011 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3012 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3013 AAMDNodes AAMD;
3014 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3015 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3016 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
3017
3018 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3019 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003020
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003021 return true;
3022}
3023
3024static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
3025 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3026 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3027 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3028 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3029 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3030 // PBI and QBI.
3031 //
3032 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3033 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3034 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3035 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3036 //
3037 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3038 //
3039 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3040 // / \ | \
3041 // PTB PFB | PFB
3042 // \ / | /
3043 // QBI QBI
3044 // / \ | \
3045 // QTB QFB | QFB
3046 // \ / | /
3047 // PostBB PostBB
3048 //
3049 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3050 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3051 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003052 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003053 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3054 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3055 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3056 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3057 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3058
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003059 // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3060 // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3061 if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3062 PostBB = QFB;
3063
3064 // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3065 if (!PostBB)
3066 return false;
3067
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003068 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3069 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3070 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3071 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3072 InvertPCond = true;
3073 }
3074 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3075 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3076 InvertQCond = true;
3077 }
3078
3079 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3080 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3081 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3082 PTB = nullptr;
3083 if (QTB == PostBB)
3084 QTB = nullptr;
3085
3086 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3087 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3088 // predecessor.
3089 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003090 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003091 };
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003092 if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003093 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3094 return false;
3095 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3096 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3097 return false;
Craig Topperc2280682017-04-17 22:13:00 +00003098 if (!PostBB->hasNUses(2) || !QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003099 return false;
3100
3101 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3102 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003103 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003104 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3105 if (!BB)
3106 continue;
3107 for (auto &I : *BB)
3108 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3109 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3110 }
3111 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3112 if (!BB)
3113 continue;
3114 for (auto &I : *BB)
3115 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3116 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3117 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003118
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003119 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3120 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3121 // clear what it contains.
3122 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3123
3124 bool Changed = false;
3125 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3126 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
3127 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
3128 return Changed;
3129}
3130
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003131/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3132/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003133/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3134/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003135static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3136 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003137 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3138 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003139
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003140 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003141 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003142 // this conditional branch redundant.
3143 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3144 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3145 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3146 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3147 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3148 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3149 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003150 BI->setCondition(
3151 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3152 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003153 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003154
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003155 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3156 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3157 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3158 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003159 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003160 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3161 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3162 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003163 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3164 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3165 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003166 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003167 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003168 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3169 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003170 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3171 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003172 NewPN->addIncoming(
3173 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3174 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003175 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003176 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003177 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003178 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003179
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003180 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003181 return true;
3182 }
3183 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003184
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003185 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3186 if (CE->canTrap())
3187 return false;
3188
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003189 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3190 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3191 // merged store at the end.
3192 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
3193 return true;
3194
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003195 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003196 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003197 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003198 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3199 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3200 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3201 ++BBI;
3202 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003203 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003204
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003205 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003206 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3207 PBIOp = 0;
3208 BIOp = 0;
3209 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3210 PBIOp = 0;
3211 BIOp = 1;
3212 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3213 PBIOp = 1;
3214 BIOp = 0;
3215 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3216 PBIOp = 1;
3217 BIOp = 1;
3218 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003219 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003220 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003221
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003222 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3223 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3224 // keep getting unwound.
3225 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3226 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003227
3228 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003229 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3230 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003231
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003232 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3233 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3234 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3235
3236 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003237 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003238 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3239 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003240 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3241 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003242
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003243 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3244 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3245 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3246 if (CE->canTrap())
3247 return false;
3248
3249 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3250 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3251 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3252 if (CE->canTrap())
3253 return false;
3254 }
3255
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003256 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003257 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003258
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003259 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003260 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003261
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003262 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3263 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3264 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3265 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3266 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3267 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3268 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3269 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3270 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3271 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003272 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3273 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003274 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3275 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003276 }
3277
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003278 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003279
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003280 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3281 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003282
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003283 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3284 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003285 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003286 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003287 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003288
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003289 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3290 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003291 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003292
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003293 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003294 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003295
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003296 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3297 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3298 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3299 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003300
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003301 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3302 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003303 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003304 bool HasWeights =
3305 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3306 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003307 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003308 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3309 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3310 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3311 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003312 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3313 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3314 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003315 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3316 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3317 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003318 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003319 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3320
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003321 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003322 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3323 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003324 }
3325
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003326 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3327 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003328 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003329
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003330 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3331 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3332 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3333 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003334 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003335 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3336 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3337 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3338 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3339 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3340 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3341 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003342 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3343 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003344 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003345 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3346 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3347 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3348 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003349 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003350 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3351 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3352 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3353 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3354 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3355 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3356 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3357 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3358
3359 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3360
3361 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3362 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3363 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3364 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003365 }
3366 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003367
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003368 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3369 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003370
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003371 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3372 // one fewer predecessor.
3373 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003374}
3375
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003376// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3377// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003378// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3379// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3380// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3381static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003382 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3383 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003384 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003385 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3386 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3387 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3388 // successor.
3389 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003390 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003391
3392 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003393 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003394 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3395 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003396 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003397 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003398 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003399 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003400 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3401 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003402 }
3403
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003404 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3405 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3406
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003407 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003408 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003409 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3410 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3411 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003412 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003413 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003414 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3415 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003416 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3417 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3418 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003419 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3420 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003421 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003422 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3423 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3424 // terminator must be unreachable.
3425 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3426 } else {
3427 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3428 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3429 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003430 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003431 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003432 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003433 else
3434 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003435 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003436 }
3437
3438 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3439 return true;
3440}
3441
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003442// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003443// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3444// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3445// unconditional otherwise.
3446static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3447 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3448 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3449 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3450 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3451 return false;
3452
3453 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3454 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003455 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
3456 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003457
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003458 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3459 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3460 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3461 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3462 if (HasWeights) {
3463 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3464 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003465 TrueWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003466 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003467 FalseWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003468 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003469 }
3470 }
3471
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003472 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003473 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3474 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003475}
3476
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003477// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003478// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3479// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3480// with
3481// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3482static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3483 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3484 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3485 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3486 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3487 return false;
3488
3489 // Extract the actual blocks.
3490 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3491 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3492
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003493 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003494 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3495 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003496}
3497
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003498/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3499/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003500/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3501/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3502/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3503/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3504/// like:
3505///
3506/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3507/// DEFAULT:
3508/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3509/// br label %end
3510/// end:
3511/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003512///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003513/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3514/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003515static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003516 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003517 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3518 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003519 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003520
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003521 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3522 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003523 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3524 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003525
3526 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3527 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003528
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003529 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3530 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3531 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3532 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003533 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3534 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003535
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003536 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3537 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3538 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003539
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003540 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3541 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3542 // away.
3543 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3544 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3545 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3546 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003547
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003548 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003549 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003550 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3551 }
3552 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003553 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003554 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003555
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003556 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3557 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3558 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003559 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003560 Value *V;
3561 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3562 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3563 else
3564 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003565
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003566 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3567 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3568 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00003569 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003570 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003571
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003572 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3573 // the block.
3574 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003575 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003576 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003577 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3578 return false;
3579
3580 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3581 // true in the PHI.
3582 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003583 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003584
3585 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3586 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3587
3588 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3589 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3590 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3591 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3592
3593 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3594 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003595 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3596 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003597 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3598 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3599 if (HasWeights) {
3600 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3601 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3602 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003603 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003604 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3605
3606 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003607 SI->setMetadata(
3608 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3609 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003610 }
3611 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003612 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003613
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003614 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003615 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3616 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3617 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003618 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3619 return true;
3620}
3621
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003622/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003623/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3624/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003625static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3626 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003627 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003628 if (!Cond)
3629 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003630
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003631 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3632 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3633 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003634
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003635 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003636 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3637 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003638 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003639 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3640 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3641 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003642
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003643 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003644 if (!CompVal)
3645 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003646
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003647 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3648 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3649 return false;
3650
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003651 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3652
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003653 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3654 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3655 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3656 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003657
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003658 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003659 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003660 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3661 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003662
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003663 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3664 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3665
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003666 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3667 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003668 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3669 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3670 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003671
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003672 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003673
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003674 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003675 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3676 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003677
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003678 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3679 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3680 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3681 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003682 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3683 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003684 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3685 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003686 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3687
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003688 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003689 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003690 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003691 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003692
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003693 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003694
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003695 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3696 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003697 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003698
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003699 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003700 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003701 BB = NewBB;
3702 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003703
3704 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003705 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3706 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003707 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3708 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003709 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003710
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003711 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003712 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003713
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003714 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3715 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3716 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003717
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003718 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3719 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3720 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003721 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003722 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3723 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003724 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003725 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3726 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003727
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003728 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3729 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003730
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003731 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003732 return true;
3733}
3734
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003735bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003736 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3737 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3738 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3739 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3740 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3741 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003742
3743 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003744}
3745
3746// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3747bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3748 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3749
3750 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3751 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3752 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003753 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003754 while (++I != E)
3755 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3756 return false;
3757
Mandeep Singh Grang799a2ed2017-04-24 19:20:45 +00003758 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003759 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3760
3761 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003762 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3763 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003764 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3765 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3766
3767 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3768 // it has other dependents.
3769 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3770 continue;
3771
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003772 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003773 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3774 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3775 continue;
3776
3777 bool isTrivial = true;
3778
3779 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3780 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3781 while (++I != E)
3782 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3783 isTrivial = false;
3784 break;
3785 }
3786
3787 if (isTrivial)
3788 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3789 }
3790
3791 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003792 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3793 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003794
3795 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3796 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3797 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3798 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3799 // to remove them all.
3800 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3801 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3802
3803 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3804 PI != PE;) {
3805 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3806 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3807 }
3808
3809 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3810 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3811 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3812 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3813 // predecessors.
3814 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3815 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3816 }
3817
3818 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3819 if (pred_empty(BB))
3820 BB->eraseFromParent();
3821
3822 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3823}
3824
3825// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3826bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003827 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3828 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003829 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3830 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003831
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003832 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3833 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003834 while (++I != E)
3835 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3836 return false;
3837
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003838 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003839 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3840 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3841 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003842 }
3843
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003844 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3845 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003846 if (LoopHeaders)
3847 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003848 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003849}
3850
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003851static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003852 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3853 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3854 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3855 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3856 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3857 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3858 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3859 // simplified.
3860 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003861 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3862 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003863 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3864 return false;
3865
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003866 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3867 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3868 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3869 return false;
3870
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003871 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003872 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003873 while (++I != E) {
3874 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3875 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003876 return false;
3877
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003878 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3879 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3880 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3881 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3882 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3883 break;
3884 default:
3885 return false;
3886 }
3887 }
3888
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003889 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3890 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003891 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003892 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003893
3894 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3895 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3896 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3897 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3898 // are both EH pads).
3899 if (UnwindDest) {
3900 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3901 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003902 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003903 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003904 I != IE; ++I) {
3905 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003906
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003907 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003908 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003909 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003910 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3911 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3912 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3913 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3914 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3915 // pad being removed.
3916 //
3917 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3918 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3919 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3920 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3921 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3922 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3923
3924 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3925 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3926
3927 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3928 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3929 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3930 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003931 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003932 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003933 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3934 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3935 }
3936 } else {
3937 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3938 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3939 // predecessors with this value.
3940 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3941 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3942 }
3943 }
3944 }
3945
3946 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003947 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003948 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3949 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003950 I != IE;) {
3951 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3952 // being moved to another block.
3953 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3954 if (PN->use_empty())
3955 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3956 // when we erase BB below.
3957 continue;
3958
3959 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3960 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3961 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3962 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3963 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3964 if (pred != BB)
3965 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3966 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3967 }
3968 }
3969
3970 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3971 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3972 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003973 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003974 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003975 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003976 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003977 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003978 }
3979 }
3980
3981 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3982 BB->eraseFromParent();
3983 return true;
3984}
3985
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003986// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3987static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3988 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3989 // with.
3990 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3991 if (!UnwindDest)
3992 return false;
3993
3994 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3995 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3996 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3997 return false;
3998
3999 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
4000 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
4001 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
4002 return false;
4003
4004 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
4005 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
4006 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
4007 // funclet bundle operands.
4008 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4009 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4010 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4011 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4012 // destination.
4013 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4014 RI->eraseFromParent();
4015
4016 return true;
4017}
4018
4019bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004020 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4021 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4022 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4023 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4024 return false;
4025
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004026 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004027 return true;
4028
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004029 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004030 return true;
4031
4032 return false;
4033}
4034
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004035bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004036 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004037 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4038 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004039
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004040 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004041 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4042 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004043 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4044 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004045 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4046 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4047 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4048 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4049 else
4050 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4051 }
4052 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004053
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004054 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004055 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004056 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4057 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4058 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004059 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004060 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004061 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004062
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004063 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004064 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004065 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4066 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004067 if (LoopHeaders)
4068 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004069 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004070
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004071 return true;
4072 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004073
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004074 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4075 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4076 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4077 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4078 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004079
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004080 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4081 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4082 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004083 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004084 return true;
4085 }
4086 return false;
4087}
4088
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004089bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4090 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004091
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004092 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004093
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004094 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4095 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004096 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4097 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004098 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004099 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4100 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4101 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004102 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4103 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004104
4105 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004106 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004107 if (SI->isVolatile())
4108 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004109 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004110 if (LI->isVolatile())
4111 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004112 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004113 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4114 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004115 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004116 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4117 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004118 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4119 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4120 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4121 // default.
4122 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4123 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4124 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4125 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004126 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4127 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004128 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004129 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004130 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4131 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4132 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4133 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004134 }
4135
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004136 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4137 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4138 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004139 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004140 Changed = true;
4141 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004142
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004143 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4144 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004145 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4146 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004147
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004148 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004149 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4150 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004151 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004152 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004153 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4154 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4155 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4156 TI->eraseFromParent();
4157 Changed = true;
4158 }
4159 } else {
4160 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004161 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004162 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4163 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004164 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004165 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4166 Changed = true;
4167 }
4168 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004169 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004170 for (auto i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004171 if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004172 ++i;
4173 continue;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004174 }
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004175 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4176 i = SI->removeCase(i);
4177 e = SI->case_end();
4178 Changed = true;
4179 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004180 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4181 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4182 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4183 Changed = true;
4184 }
4185 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4186 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4187 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4188 Changed = true;
4189 continue;
4190 }
4191
4192 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4193 E = CSI->handler_end();
4194 I != E; ++I) {
4195 if (*I == BB) {
4196 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4197 --I;
4198 --E;
4199 Changed = true;
4200 }
4201 }
4202 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4203 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4204 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4205 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4206 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4207 } else {
4208 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4209 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4210 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4211 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4212 }
4213 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4214 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4215 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4216 Changed = true;
4217 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004218 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004219 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4220 TI->eraseFromParent();
4221 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004222 }
4223 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004224
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004225 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004226 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004227 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4228 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004229 if (LoopHeaders)
4230 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004231 return true;
4232 }
4233
4234 return Changed;
4235}
4236
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004237static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4238 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4239
4240 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4241 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4242 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4243 return false;
4244 }
4245 return true;
4246}
4247
4248/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4249/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004250static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004251 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004252
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004253 bool HasDefault =
4254 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004255
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004256 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4257 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4258 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004259 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4260 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004261
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004262 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4263 BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004264 if (!DestA)
4265 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004266 if (Dest == DestA) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004267 CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004268 continue;
4269 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004270 if (!DestB)
4271 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004272 if (Dest == DestB) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004273 CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004274 continue;
4275 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004276 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004277 }
4278
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004279 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4280 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004281 assert(DestA != DestB);
4282 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4283 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4284 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4285
4286 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4287 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4288 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4289 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4290 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4291 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4292 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4293 OtherDest = DestB;
4294 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4295 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4296 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4297 OtherDest = DestA;
4298 } else
4299 return false;
4300
4301 // Start building the compare and branch.
4302
4303 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004304 Constant *NumCases =
4305 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004306
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004307 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4308 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004309 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4310
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004311 Value *Cmp;
4312 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004313 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004314 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4315 else
4316 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004317 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004318
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004319 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004320 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4321 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004322 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4323 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004324 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4325 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4326 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4327 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4328 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4329 else
4330 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4331 }
4332 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4333 TrueWeight /= 2;
4334 FalseWeight /= 2;
4335 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004336 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004337 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4338 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4339 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004340 }
4341 }
4342
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004343 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4344 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4345 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004346 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4347 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004348 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004349 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4350 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004351 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4352 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004353 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4354 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004355 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4356 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4357 }
4358
4359 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004360 SI->eraseFromParent();
4361
4362 return true;
4363}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004364
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004365/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004366/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004367static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
4368 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004369 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004370 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004371 KnownBits Known(Bits);
4372 computeKnownBits(Cond, Known, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004373
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004374 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4375 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4376 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004377 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004378 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4379
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004380 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004381 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004382 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004383 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004384 if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004385 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004386 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004387 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004388 }
4389 }
4390
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004391 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4392 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004393 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4394 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004395 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004396 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4397 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004398 Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004399 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004400 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004401 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004402 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004403 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004404 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4405 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004406 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4407 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004408 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4409 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4410 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4411 return true;
4412 }
4413
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004414 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4415 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4416 if (HasWeight) {
4417 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4418 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4419 }
4420
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004421 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004422 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004423 SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
4424 assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004425 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004426 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004427 std::swap(Weights[CaseI->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004428 Weights.pop_back();
4429 }
4430
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004431 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004432 CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4433 SI->removeCase(CaseI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004434 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004435 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004436 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4437 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004438 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4439 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004440 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004441
4442 return !DeadCases.empty();
4443}
4444
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004445/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4446/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004447/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4448/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4449/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4450static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004451 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004452 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004453 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004454 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004455 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004456
4457 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4458 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004459 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004460
4461 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4462
4463 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4464 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4465 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4466 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4467
4468 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004469 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4470 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004471
4472 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4473 return PHI;
4474 }
4475
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004476 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004477}
4478
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004479/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4480/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4481/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004482/// Returns true if a change is made.
4483static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004484 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004485 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4486
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004487 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4488 ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
4489 BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004490
4491 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004492 PHINode *PHI =
4493 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4494 if (!PHI)
4495 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004496
4497 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4498 }
4499
4500 bool Changed = false;
4501
4502 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004503 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4504 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004505 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004506 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004507
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004508 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4509 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004510
4511 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4512 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4513 Changed = true;
4514 }
4515
4516 return Changed;
4517}
4518
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004519/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004520/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004521static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004522 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4523 return false;
4524 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4525 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004526
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004527 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4528 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4529 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4530 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004531
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004532 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004533 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4534 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004535 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4536 return false;
4537 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004538
4539 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4540 return false;
4541
4542 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004543}
4544
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004545/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004546/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004547static Constant *
4548LookupConstant(Value *V,
4549 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004550 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4551 return C;
4552 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4553}
4554
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004555/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004556/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4557/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004558/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004559static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004560ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4561 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004562 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004563 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4564 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004565 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004566 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4567 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4568 if (A->isNullValue())
4569 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004570 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004571 }
4572
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004573 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4574 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4575 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4576 COps.push_back(A);
4577 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004578 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004579 }
4580
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004581 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004582 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4583 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004584 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004585
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004586 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004587}
4588
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004589/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004590/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004591/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004592/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004593static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004594GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004595 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004596 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004597 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004598 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4599 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4600
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004601 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4602 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004603 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004604 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4605 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4606 ++I) {
4607 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4608 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004609 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004610 return false;
4611 Pred = CaseDest;
4612 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4613 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4614 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4615 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004616 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004617 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004618
4619 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4620 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4621 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4622 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4623 User *User = Use.getUser();
4624 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4625 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4626 continue;
4627 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4628 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4629 continue;
4630 return false;
4631 }
4632
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004633 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004634 } else {
4635 break;
4636 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004637 }
4638
4639 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4640 if (!*CommonDest)
4641 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4642 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4643 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4644 return false;
4645
4646 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4647 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4648 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4649 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4650 if (Idx == -1)
4651 continue;
4652
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004653 Constant *ConstVal =
4654 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004655 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004656 return false;
4657
4658 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004659 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004660 return false;
4661
4662 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4663 }
4664
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004665 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004666}
4667
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004668// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4669// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004670static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004671 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4672 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004673 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4674 if (I.first == Result) {
4675 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4676 return;
4677 }
4678 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004679 UniqueResults.push_back(
4680 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004681}
4682
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004683// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004684// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4685// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4686// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004687static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4688 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4689 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4690 Constant *&DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004691 const DataLayout &DL,
4692 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004693 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4694 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4695
4696 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4697 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4698 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004699 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004700 return false;
4701
4702 // Only one value per case is permitted
4703 if (Results.size() > 1)
4704 return false;
4705 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4706
4707 // Check the PHI consistency.
4708 if (!PHI)
4709 PHI = Results[0].first;
4710 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4711 return false;
4712 }
4713 // Find the default result value.
4714 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4715 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4716 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004717 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004718 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4719 // is unreachable.
4720 DefaultResult =
4721 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4722 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004723 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004724 return false;
4725
4726 return true;
4727}
4728
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004729// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4730// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004731// Example:
4732// switch (a) {
4733// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4734// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4735// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4736// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4737// default:
4738// return 4;
4739// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004740static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4741 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4742 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004743 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004744 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004745 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4746 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4747 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4748 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4749 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4750 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4751
4752 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4753 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4754 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4755 Value *const ValueCompare =
4756 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4757 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4758 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4759 }
4760 Value *const ValueCompare =
4761 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004762 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4763 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004764 }
4765
4766 return nullptr;
4767}
4768
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004769// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4770// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004771static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4772 Value *SelectValue,
4773 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4774 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4775 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4776 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4777 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4778
4779 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4780
4781 // Remove the switch.
4782 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4783 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4784
4785 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4786 continue;
4787 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4788 }
4789 SI->eraseFromParent();
4790}
4791
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004792/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004793/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4794/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4795static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004796 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004797 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004798 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4799 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4800 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4801 Constant *DefaultResult;
4802 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4803 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004804 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004805 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004806 return false;
4807 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4808 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4809 return false;
4810 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4811
4812 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004813 Value *SelectValue =
4814 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004815 if (SelectValue) {
4816 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4817 return true;
4818 }
4819 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4820 return false;
4821}
4822
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004823namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004824
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004825/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4826class SwitchLookupTable {
4827public:
4828 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4829 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4830 SwitchLookupTable(
4831 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4832 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4833 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004834
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004835 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4836 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4837 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004838
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004839 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4840 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4841 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4842 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004843
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004844private:
4845 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4846 // different ways.
4847 enum {
4848 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4849 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4850 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004851
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004852 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4853 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4854 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4855 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004856
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004857 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4858 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4859 // shift and mask operations.
4860 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004861
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004862 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4863 // instructions from the table.
4864 ArrayKind
4865 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004866
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004867 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4868 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004869
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004870 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4871 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4872 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004873
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004874 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4875 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4876 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004877
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004878 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4879 GlobalVariable *Array;
4880};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004881
4882} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004883
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004884SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4885 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4886 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4887 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004888 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004889 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004890 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4891 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004892
4893 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004894 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004895
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004896 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4897
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004898 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004899 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004900 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4901 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4902 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004903 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004904
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004905 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004906 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4907
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004908 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004909 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004910 }
4911
4912 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004913 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004914 assert(DefaultValue &&
4915 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004916 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004917 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4918 if (!TableContents[I])
4919 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004920 }
4921
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004922 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004923 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004924 }
4925
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004926 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4927 // that single value.
4928 if (SingleValue) {
4929 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4930 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004931 }
4932
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004933 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4934 // table index.
4935 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4936 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4937 APInt PrevVal;
4938 APInt DistToPrev;
4939 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4940 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4941 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4942 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4943 if (!ConstVal) {
4944 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4945 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4946 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4947 break;
4948 }
4949 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4950 if (I != 0) {
4951 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4952 if (I == 1) {
4953 DistToPrev = Dist;
4954 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4955 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4956 break;
4957 }
4958 }
4959 PrevVal = Val;
4960 }
4961 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4962 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4963 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4964 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4965 ++NumLinearMaps;
4966 return;
4967 }
4968 }
4969
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004970 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004971 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004972 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004973 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4974 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4975 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004976 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4977 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4978 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4979 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4980 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004981 }
4982 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4983 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4984 Kind = BitMapKind;
4985 ++NumBitMaps;
4986 return;
4987 }
4988
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004989 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004990 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004991 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4992
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004993 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4994 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004995 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004996 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004997 Kind = ArrayKind;
4998}
4999
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005000Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005001 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005002 case SingleValueKind:
5003 return SingleValue;
5004 case LinearMapKind: {
5005 // Derive the result value from the input value.
5006 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
5007 false, "switch.idx.cast");
5008 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5009 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5010 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5011 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5012 return Result;
5013 }
5014 case BitMapKind: {
5015 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5016 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005017
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005018 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5019 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5020 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5021 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005022
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005023 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5024 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5025 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5026 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005027
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005028 // Shift down.
5029 Value *DownShifted =
5030 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5031 // Mask off.
5032 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5033 }
5034 case ArrayKind: {
5035 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5036 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5037 uint64_t TableSize =
5038 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5039 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5040 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5041 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5042 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005043
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005044 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5045 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5046 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5047 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5048 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005049 }
5050 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5051}
5052
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005053bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005054 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005055 Type *ElementType) {
5056 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005057 if (!IT)
5058 return false;
5059 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5060 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005061
5062 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005063 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005064 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005065 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005066}
5067
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005068/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5069/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005070static bool
5071ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5072 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5073 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005074 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5075 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005076
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005077 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005078 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005079 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5080 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005081
5082 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005083 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005084
5085 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005086 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5087 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5088 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005089
5090 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5091 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5092 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5093 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005094 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005095 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005096
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005097 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5098 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5099 return true;
5100
5101 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5102 if (HasIllegalType)
5103 return false;
5104
5105 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5106 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5107 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5108 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005109}
5110
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005111/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5112/// \code
5113/// if (idx < tablesize)
5114/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5115/// else
5116/// r = default_value;
5117/// if (r != default_value)
5118/// ...
5119/// \endcode
5120/// Is optimized to:
5121/// \code
5122/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5123/// if (cond)
5124/// r = table[idx];
5125/// else
5126/// r = default_value;
5127/// if (cond)
5128/// ...
5129/// \endcode
5130/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005131static void reuseTableCompare(
5132 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5133 Constant *DefaultValue,
5134 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005135
5136 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5137 if (!CmpInst)
5138 return;
5139
5140 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5141 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5142 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5143 return;
5144
5145 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5146 if (!CmpOp1)
5147 return;
5148
5149 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5150 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5151 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5152
5153 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5154 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5155 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5156 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5157 return;
5158
5159 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5160 // compare result.
5161 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5162 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005163 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005164 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
5165 return;
5166 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5167 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5168 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005169
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005170 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5171 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5172 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5173 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5174 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5175 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5176 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5177 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5178 return;
5179 }
5180
5181 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5182 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5183 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5184 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5185 } else {
5186 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005187 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5188 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5189 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005190 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5191 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5192 }
5193}
5194
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005195/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5196/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5197/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005198static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5199 const DataLayout &DL,
5200 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005201 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005202
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00005203 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005204 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005205 return false;
5206
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005207 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5208 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5209
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005210 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5211 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5212 // string and lookup indices into that.
5213
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005214 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
5215 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005216 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
5217 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005218 return false;
5219
5220 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005221 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005222 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5223 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005224 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5225 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005226
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005227 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005228 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
5229 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
5230 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5231 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5232 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005233
5234 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005235 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005236 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5237 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5238 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5239 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5240
5241 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005242 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005243 ResultsTy Results;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005244 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005245 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005246 return false;
5247
5248 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005249 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5250 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5251 Constant *Value = I.second;
5252 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5253 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5254 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005255 }
5256 }
5257
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005258 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005259 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005260 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5261 }
5262
5263 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5264 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5265 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5266 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5267
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005268 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5269 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005270 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005271 bool HasDefaultResults =
5272 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5273 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005274
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005275 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5276 if (NeedMask) {
5277 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005278 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005279 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005280 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005281 return false;
5282 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005283
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005284 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5285 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5286 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005287 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005288 }
5289
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005290 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005291 return false;
5292
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005293 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005294 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005295 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5296 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005297
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005298 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005299 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005300 Value *TableIndex =
5301 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005302
5303 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5304 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005305 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005306 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005307 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5308 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5309 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5310
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005311 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5312 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5313 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5314 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5315 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5316 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005317 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5318
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005319 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005320 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005321 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5322 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005323 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005324 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5325 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5326 RangeCheckBranch =
5327 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005328 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005329
5330 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5331 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005332
5333 if (NeedMask) {
5334 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
5335 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
5336 // and we create a new LookupBB.
5337 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5338 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005339 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5340 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005341
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005342 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
5343 // unnecessary illegal types.
5344 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5345 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5346 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005347 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005348 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5349 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005350 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5351 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005352 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5353 }
5354 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5355
5356 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5357 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5358 // else continue with table lookup.
5359 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005360 Value *MaskIndex =
5361 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5362 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5363 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5364 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005365 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5366
5367 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5368 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5369 }
5370
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005371 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5372 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
5373 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5374 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5375 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5376 }
5377
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005378 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005379 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5380 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005381 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005382
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005383 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5384 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005385 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005386
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005387 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005388
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005389 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5390 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005391 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5392 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005393 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5394 ReturnedEarly = true;
5395 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005396 }
5397
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005398 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5399 // possible.
5400 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5401 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5402 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5403 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5404 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5405 }
5406 }
5407
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005408 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005409 }
5410
5411 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5412 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5413
5414 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005415 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005416 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005417
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005418 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005419 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005420 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5421 }
5422 SI->eraseFromParent();
5423
5424 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005425 if (NeedMask)
5426 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005427 return true;
5428}
5429
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005430static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5431 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5432 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5433 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5434 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5435 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5436 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005437
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005438 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5439}
5440
5441// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5442// of cases.
5443//
5444// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5445// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5446//
5447// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5448// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5449static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5450 const DataLayout &DL,
5451 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5452 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5453 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5454 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5455 return false;
5456 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5457 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5458 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5459 return false;
5460
5461 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5462 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5463 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5464 // as signed.
5465 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5466 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5467 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5468 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5469
5470 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5471 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5472 return false;
5473
5474 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5475 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5476 for (auto &V : Values)
5477 V -= Base;
5478
5479 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5480 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5481 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5482 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5483 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005484 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005485
5486 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5487 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5488 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5489 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5490 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5491 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5492 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5493 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005494 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005495 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5496 return false;
5497
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005498 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005499 for (auto &V : Values)
5500 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5501
5502 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5503 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5504 return false;
5505
5506 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5507 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5508 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5509 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5510 //
5511 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5512 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5513 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5514 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005515
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005516 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5517 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5518 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5519 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005520 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5521 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5522 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005523 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5524
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005525 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5526 auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005527 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005528 Case.setValue(
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005529 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005530 }
5531 return true;
5532}
5533
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005534bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005535 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5536
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005537 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5538 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5539 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5540 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5541 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005542 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005543
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005544 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5545 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5546 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005547 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005548
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005549 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5550 // away into any preds.
5551 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5552 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5553 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5554 ++BBI;
5555 if (SI == &*BBI)
5556 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005557 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005558 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005559
5560 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005561 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005562 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005563
5564 // Remove unreachable cases.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005565 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5566 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005567
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005568 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL, TTI))
5569 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005570
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005571 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005572 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005573
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +00005574 // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult
5575 // to analyze code and makes pruning branches much harder.
5576 // This is a problem of the switch expression itself can still be
5577 // restricted as a result of inlining or CVP. There only apply this
5578 // transformation during late steps of the optimisation chain.
5579 if (LateSimplifyCFG && SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005580 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005581
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005582 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005583 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005584
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005585 return false;
5586}
5587
5588bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5589 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5590 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005591
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005592 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5593 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5594 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5595 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005596 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005597 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5598 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005599 --i;
5600 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005601 Changed = true;
5602 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005603 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005604
5605 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5606 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5607 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5608 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5609 return true;
5610 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005611
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005612 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5613 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5614 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5615 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5616 return true;
5617 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005618
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005619 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5620 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005621 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005622 }
5623 return Changed;
5624}
5625
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005626/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5627/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5628/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5629/// a shared handler.
5630///
5631/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5632/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5633/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5634/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5635/// sinking in this file)
5636///
5637/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5638/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5639/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5640/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5641/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5642/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5643///
5644/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5645/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5646/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5647static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5648 BasicBlock *BB) {
5649 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5650 assert(Succ);
5651 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5652 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5653 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5654 return false;
5655
5656 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5657 if (BB == OtherPred)
5658 continue;
5659 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5660 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5661 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5662 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005663 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5664 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005665 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5666 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5667 continue;
5668
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005669 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005670 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5671 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5672 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5673 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5674 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005675 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5676 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005677 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5678 }
5679
5680 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5681 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005682 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5683 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5684 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005685 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5686 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5687 }
5688
5689 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5690 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5691 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5692 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5693 }
5694
5695 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5696 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5697 BI->eraseFromParent();
5698 return true;
5699 }
5700 return false;
5701}
5702
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005703bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5704 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005705 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005706
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005707 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5708 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005709
5710 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5711 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005712 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5713 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5714 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5715 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005716 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005717 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005718 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005719 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5720 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005721
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005722 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5723 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5724 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5725 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5726 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5727 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005728 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005729 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005730 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005731 return true;
5732 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005733
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005734 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5735 // equivalent.
5736 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005737 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5738 }
5739 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005740 return true;
5741 }
5742
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005743 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5744 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5745 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5746 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005747 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005748 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005749 return false;
5750}
5751
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005752static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5753 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5754 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5755 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5756 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5757 return nullptr;
5758 PredPred = PPred;
5759 }
5760 return PredPred;
5761}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005762
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005763bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005764 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005765
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005766 // Conditional branch
5767 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5768 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5769 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5770 // switch.
5771 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005772 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005773 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005774
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005775 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5776 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5777 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5778 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5779 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5780 ++I;
5781 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005782 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005783 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005784 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005785 ++I;
5786 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5787 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5788 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005789 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005790 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005791 }
5792 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005793
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005794 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005795 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005796 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005797
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005798 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5799 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5800 // of the BI branch.
5801 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5802 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5803 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5804 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5805 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5806 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5807 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5808 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5809 if (Implication) {
5810 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5811 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5812 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5813 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5814 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5815 BI->setCondition(CI);
5816 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005817 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005818 }
5819 }
5820 }
5821
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005822 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5823 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5824 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005825 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005826 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005827
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005828 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5829 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5830 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5831 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005832 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5833 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005834 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005835 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005836 } else {
5837 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005838 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005839 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5840 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5841 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005842 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005843 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005844 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005845 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005846 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005847 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005848 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5849 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5850 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005851 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005852 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005853 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005854
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005855 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5856 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5857 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5858 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00005859 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005860 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005861
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005862 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005863 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5864 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005865 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005866 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005867 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005868
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005869 // Look for diamond patterns.
5870 if (MergeCondStores)
5871 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5872 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5873 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5874 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00005875 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005876
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005877 return false;
5878}
5879
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005880/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5881static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5882 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5883 if (!C)
5884 return false;
5885
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005886 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005887 return false;
5888
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005889 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005890 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005891 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005892
5893 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5894 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005895 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5896 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5897 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5898 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005899 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005900 return false;
5901
5902 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5903 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5904 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5905 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5906
5907 // Look through bitcasts.
5908 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5909 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5910
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005911 // Load from null is undefined.
5912 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005913 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5914 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005915
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005916 // Store to null is undefined.
5917 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005918 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005919 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5920 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005921
5922 // A call to null is undefined.
5923 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5924 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005925 }
5926 return false;
5927}
5928
5929/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005930/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005931static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5932 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5933 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5934 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5935 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5936 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5937 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5938 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5939 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5940 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5941 // destination from conditional branches.
5942 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5943 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5944 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005945 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5946 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005947 BI->eraseFromParent();
5948 return true;
5949 }
5950 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5951 }
5952
5953 return false;
5954}
5955
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005956bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005957 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005958
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005959 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005960 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005961
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005962 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5963 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005964 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005965 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005966 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5967 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5968 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005969 }
5970
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005971 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5972 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005973 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005974
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005975 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5976 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5977
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005978 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5979 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5980
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005981 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5982 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5983 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5984 //
5985 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5986 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005987
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005988 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5989
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005990 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5991 // eliminate it, do so now.
5992 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5993 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005994 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005995
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005996 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005997 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005998 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005999 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
6000 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006001 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006002 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
6003 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006004 }
6005 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006006 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
6007 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00006008 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006009 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
6010 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00006011 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006012 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
6013 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
6014 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006015 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006016 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
6017 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006018 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006019 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
6020 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6021 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006022 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006023 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
6024 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6025 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006026 }
6027
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006028 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006029}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006030
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00006031/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
6032/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006033/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
6034/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
6035///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00006036bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00006037 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +00006038 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
6039 bool LateSimplifyCFG) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006040 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +00006041 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders, LateSimplifyCFG)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006042 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006043}